OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 FIAT 500
15FF500-126-AE Fifth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FIAT 500
FCA US LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................81
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................139
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................219
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................301
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................343
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................403
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . ..........................................411
10
INDEX .....................................................................421
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be as-
sured that it represents precision workmanship, distinc-
tive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are
traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that
FCA US LLC offers to its customers:
• The Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity
• The range of additional services available to FCA US
LLC customers
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-
tion.
4 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
1
INTRODUCTION 5
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears engraved on
the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate, on an
adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the
B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
8 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............11
▫ Ignition Key Removal ...................11
▫ Locking Doors With A Key................13
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................13
䡵 SENTRY KEY® .........................13
▫ Replacement Keys .....................14
▫ General Information ....................14
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................15
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........16
▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/
All Doors 1st Press .....................16
▫ Opening Power Top Remote Function .......16
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............18
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters........18
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........18
▫ General Information ....................20
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................21
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ..........22
▫ Auto Door Locks ......................23
2
䡵 POWER WINDOWS .....................24
▫ Power Window Switches .................24
▫ Auto-Down ..........................25
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................25
䡵 LIFTGATE ............................25
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........26
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............26
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................28
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........39
▫ Child Restraints .......................55
▫ Transporting Pets ......................74
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....74
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................75
▫ Transporting Passengers..................75
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................76
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................77
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................79
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical
key, simply push the mechanical key release button.
The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key
code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the autho-
rized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys.
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position.
Mechanical Key Release Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK and re-
move the Key Fob from the vehicle. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn the
key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a
signal to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unau-
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned
to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not com-
patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. When hav-
ing the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring
all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice,
within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
Opening Power Top Remote Function
The remote keyless power top function can only be used
with the engine off.
NOTE: The remote keyless power top function can be
used to open the power top to the spoiler position.
Key Fob
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Power Top Remote Function:
1. OPEN — Push and hold the unlock button down on
the key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate
Power Top Open. The roof will stop opening when-
ever the unlock button on the key fob is released, or
when it reaches the spoiler position
NOTE: If your power convertible top does not open with
the remote, please refer to the ⬙Power Convertible Top
Relearn Procedure” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for additional information.
WARNING!
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you:
• Before operating the power top, make sure that no
moving parts of the convertible top can injure a
person or animal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near
the convertible top components, the upper wind-
shield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or
the convertible top stowage area while raising or
lowering the convertible top.
• When using the power top button on RKE trans-
mitter, if potential danger exists while lowering the
top, release the button immediately to interrupt the
operation.
• Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top
completely closed and latched or fully lowered into
its stowage compartment.
• Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is in
motion.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to “Sentry Key®” in “Things To Know Before
Starting” for further information.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the
mechanical key to access the battery case screw lo-
cated on the side of the Key Fob.
Mechanical Key Release Button
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob
using a small screwdriver.
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the
battery observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the
screw to lock it into place.
Key Fob Screw Location Battery Case Removed
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from
inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the door
handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the
door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed,
the door will lock.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always turn the ignition to
the OFF/LOCK position, apply the parking brake,
shift the transmission into REVERSE gear, and
remove the Key Fob from the vehicle. When leav-
ing the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
Driver’s Door Lock Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is incorporated into the driver
door handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate. If the driver’s door handle is pushed
a red lock indicator will show on the driver’s door handle
(indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will
lock.
NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the
vehicle, the doors will automatically unlock if the driv-
er’s door handle is pushed when the key is in the
ignition.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Door Locks
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicles speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
To change the setting proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push the MENU button to enter the MENU
screen.
2. Push the UP
or DOWN button to highlight
“Auto Door Locks”. Push the MENU button, use
the UP
or DOWN buttons to turn setting ON
or OFF.
3. Briefly push the MENU button to go back to the menu
screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen
without storing the settings.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
Driver’s Power Door Lock Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Own-
er’s Manual on your DVD for further information.
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls located on the shifter bezel,
below the climate controls, which operate the driver and
passenger door windows. The window controls will operate
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped by
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
Power Window Switches
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down
The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch for approximately one
second, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the
switch in either the up or down direction and release the
switch.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize
the buffeting or open any window.
LIFTGATE
To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or activate the power door lock
switches located on the driver door handle.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Liftgate Handle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
NOTE: Gas props support the liftgate in the open posi-
tion. However, because the gas pressure drops with
temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and
visual notification.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear
the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING! (Continued)
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) —
If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second
Row
ALR N/A ALR
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- ably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic
Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating
positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bag
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretenioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” and “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact
Bolster
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column.
The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides en-
hanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
Front Air Bags.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts.
SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment
of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side
of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-
tion.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
System Reset Procedure
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right
turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel cluster,
may both be blinking and will continue to blink until the
ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. In order to
move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must
follow the system reset procedure.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Action Customer Will See
1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be
placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition ON. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS.
3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS.
4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light BLINKS.
5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS.
6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON
SOLID.
7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF.
8. Turn ignition OFF.
9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually). System is now reset and the engine may be started.
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45
seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the
reset procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position the air bag system is not on and the air
bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or
if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information:
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use
the LATCH anchorage system to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child re-
straint.
Can two child restraints be attached us-
ing a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to
install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See
your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Yes, all may be removed
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
ditional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes Yes, all may be removed
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating
position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether
strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the
section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.”
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED . .84
▫ Lowering The Power Top.................84
▫ Raising The Power Top ..................85
▫ Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure .....86
▫ Wind Stop ...........................87
䡵 MIRRORS .............................88
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror .................88
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .89
▫ Power Mirrors ........................90
▫ Folding Mirrors........................91
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............91
▫ Sun Visors ...........................92
䡵 BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE
COMMUNICATION......................92
▫ Blue&Me™ Hands-Free Communication
Overview — If Equipped .................92
▫ The Hands-Free Kit .....................93
䡵 SEATS ...............................99
▫ Forward/Rearward Adjustment ...........100
▫ Recline Adjustment ....................100
3
▫ Seat Height Adjustment .................101
▫ EZ Entry Feature ......................102
▫ Memory Feature ......................102
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............103
▫ Head Restraints ......................104
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........107
䡵 LIGHTS .............................109
▫ Multifunction Lever ....................109
▫ Headlights ..........................109
▫ High Beams .........................110
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................110
▫ Parking Lights .......................110
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .....110
▫ Turn Signals .........................111
▫ Lane Change Assist ....................111
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay .........111
▫ Interior Lights .......................112
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ...........113
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......114
▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation .........114
▫ Rear Windshield Wiper .................116
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . .117
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...........118
▫ To Activate ..........................119
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................119
▫ To Deactivate.........................119
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Resume Speed .....................120
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............120
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ................121
䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ........122
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors ................122
▫ Rear Park Assist Warning Display ..........123
▫ Rear Park Assist Display ................123
▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts ...........123
▫ Failure Indications .....................125
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System .......125
▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions .......126
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........128
▫ To Open ............................129
▫ To Close ............................129
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................129
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................129
▫ Emergency Operation...................130
▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped ...............130
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........131
䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED ..........133
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................134
䡵 STORAGE ............................135
▫ Glove Compartment ...................135
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ................135
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............137
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................137
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED
On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top, the
power convertible top switch is located on the overhead
console. The switch contains two buttons. The passenger
side button, is used to open the power top, and the driver
side button, is used to close the power top.
NOTE:
• The power top buttons will operate when the ignition
switch is turned to the ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The power top can be remotely operated with the key
fob. Refer to “Opening Power Top Remote Function”
in “Things To Know Before Starting” for more infor-
mation.
Lowering The Power Top
Auto Open
Push the top open button approximately one second for
the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top
open button for approximately one second a second time
to fully open the convertible top.
Power Convertible Top Switch
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Open
For manual open, push and hold the open button until
desired roof position or until spoiler position.
NOTE: Vertical movement only operates in auto open/
close mode.
Raising The Power Top
Auto Close
From the convertible top fully open position, push the
top close button for approximately one second for the
three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top close
button for approximately one second a second time for
the one-quarter open position. Push and hold close
button to fully close convertible top.
Manual Close
For manual close, push and hold the close button until
desired position until one-quarter open position. Push
and hold again for full close position.
NOTE: Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000
cycles, or if scratching noises due to dust are present.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubes, and Genuine Part” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for information.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can dam-
age the top material. Also, increased water pressure
may force water past the weather strips.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Remove any standing water from the top and dry the
surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening
a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may
allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
WARNING!
The convertible top does not provide the structural
protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the
fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection
of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is impor-
tant that all occupants wear their seat belts at all
times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are
ejected from the vehicle during a collision.
Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure
If your power convertible top does not operate in the
Auto Opening/Closing mode (automatically opening/
closing to the one-quarter open and three-quarter open
comfort stops), or if the remote keyless power top
function is inoperable, or if the trunk lid does not open -
the following relearn procedure may be necessary.
1. Confirm that the door/trunk lid are closed.
2. Begin with the top in the fully closed position (using
manual mode).
3. Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully
open position.
4. CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an addi-
tional three seconds.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Release the OPEN button.
6. Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully
closed position.
7. CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top
begins to cycle fully open, then release the CLOSED
button.
At the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the
fully open position, and then close to the 1/4 open
position.
This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success-
ful.
Auto Open/Close will now be functional. Trunk lid
operation will be functional. Remote Keyless Power Top
Function will be functional.
NOTE: DO NOT interrupt this activity.
If the power convertible top does not relearn repeat the
procedure a second time.
Wind Stop
The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle.
The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top opera-
tion. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select
switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push the mirror select switch to either the L (left)
or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirror Switches
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Spotter Mirror — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter
mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of
visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to
pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The
mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal
and full rearward.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Spotter Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Sun Visors
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be
rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun
visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors.
BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION
Blue&Me™ Hands-Free Communication Overview
— If Equipped
Windows Mobile™-based FIAT BLUE&ME™ is a per-
sonal telematic system enabling you to use communica-
tion and entertainment applications expressly designed
for use in the car.
The BLUE&ME™ system installed on your car is
equipped with a hands-free kit, message reader and
media player, and it is preset for future installation of
additional services.
The BLUE&ME™ system, fully integrated with voice
commands, buttons on the steering wheel and multifunc-
tion display messages, gives you the possibility of inter-
acting with your Bluetooth® wireless technology mobile
phone (even if you keep it in your pocket or bag) without
having to take your eyes off the road or remove your
hands from the steering wheel. To use voice commands
Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown)
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
you are not required to train the voice recognition system
to recognize your voice. This implies that the system is
nearly equally performing with different persons, i.e.: the
voice recognition system is of the “speaker independent”
type.
With this system you can also play your favorite music
stored on USB device and select tracks and playback
modes with both voice commands or buttons on the
steering wheel.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules
subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept all interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
The Hands-Free Kit
The basic characteristic of this hands-free kit is voice
recognition with Bluetooth® wireless technology. With
this system you can make and receive calls safely and
securely by using either voice commands or buttons on
the steering wheel. This can be done under any driving
condition without ever having to take your eyes off the
road or remove your hands from the steering wheel, as
required by current laws.
Bluetooth® wireless technology enables wireless connec-
tion between your mobile phone and the hands-free kit
installed on your car.
To use the hands-free kit, you need a Bluetooth® wireless
technology enabled mobile phone. This hands-free kit
gives you the possibility of interacting vocally with your
mobile phone while driving, even if your mobile device
does not feature Voice Recognition. You can also interact
with your mobile phone manually and visually using the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
steering wheel controls and the instrument panel multi-
function display. Please refer to the Fiat Blue & Me Radio
Supplement for further information.
To get started with BLUE&ME™ hands-free kit with
voice recognition, you have to simply pair your
Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled mobile phone
with the system.
Pairing is an operation that has to be made only once.
NOTE:
• During the mobile phone pairing procedure,
BLUE&ME™ attempts to detect a phone equipped
with Bluetooth® wireless technology within range and
then establishes the connection using a Personal Iden-
tification Number (PIN).
• Once your phone is paired, you have the option to
transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands-free
kit, to make a phone call either by using the contacts
list or directly pronouncing the phone number, to
answer a call and also to answer another incoming
phone call.
Steering Wheel Hands Free Buttons
1 — Mute/ESC 3 — Phone Hang Up
2 — Phone/Main 4 — Voice Recognition (VR)
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To interact with BLUE&ME™ you can use either the
buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands.
With voice recognition, you can perform system func-
tions by speaking voice commands, also identified as
“keywords”. When the system recognizes a keyword,
it will respond with the appropriate action. Voice
recognition is an easy and convenient way to use
BLUE&ME™.
All the system functions are available within the
BLUE&ME™ Main Menu. When the car is not moving,
you can scroll through the complete menu by using either
the buttons on the steering wheel or the voice commands.
When you are traveling, you can interact with
BLUE&ME™ by using the buttons on the steering wheel
or voice commands relevant only to phone functions
(LAST CALLS and PHONEBOOK) and the media player.
To activate settings when travelling you can only use
voice commands.
The hands-free kit enables the following operations:
• Contact Calling By Voice — You can call a contact in
your mobile phone phonebook using your voice. You
can also call a contact in your phonebook by scanning
through the entries on the multifunction display. (To
use this option you have to transfer your mobile phone
contacts to the hands-free kit phonebook).
• Digit Dialing By Voice — You can dial a phone
number by pushing the VR button on the steering
wheel and speaking the digits to be dialed.
• To Call The SMS Text Sender — Call directly the last
SMS text sender or the sender of a message received
and stored in the BLUE&ME™ inbox.
• To Answer A Call — You can answer an incoming call
by pushing the MAIN/Phone button on the steering
wheel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
• Conference Call — You can call another contact while
you are engaged in a phone conversation (with
Bluetooth® phones supporting this option).
• Call Waiting — While engaged in a phone conversa-
tion, you can receive notification of another incoming
phone call, answer the other incoming phone call, and
switch between two ongoing phone conversations.
(Call waiting is only supported by a subset of compat-
ible mobile phones).
• Refusing Incoming Call Or Ending A Call —
You can
refuse an incoming call or end a current call by pushing
the Phone Hang-up button on the steering wheel.
After pairing and connecting your phone with the
BLUE&ME™ system, you can make phone calls by
speaking keywords or pushing buttons on the steering
wheel. When using the hands-free phone, the audio
output of a phone conversation is heard through your car
sound speakers.
Message Reader
The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables automatic
reading, through the car sound system, of the SMS texts
you receive on your Bluetooth® wireless technology
mobile phone that are received when the phone is paired
and connected to the BLUE&ME™ system. It does not
provide access to messages that were received before the
device was connected with the BLUE&ME™ system. The
message reader will also interpret many abbreviations
and emoticons contained in the SMS text.
NOTE: Not all mobile phones support the SMS text
message reader function or automatic phonebook trans-
fer via Bluetooth®. For further information on the list of
compatible mobile phones go to http://
www.fiatusa.com, find the SUPPORT section near the
bottom of web page and click on the Bluetooth® logo.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Message reader functions are managed by the control
buttons on the steering wheel or by the BLUE&ME™
voice commands.
The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables the following
operations:
• To display an indicator on the instrument panel that
indicates you have received a new SMS text. It will
display the sender’s number/name and will ask you
whether to read the text of the message to you.
• To manage the list of SMS texts received on your
BLUE&ME™ paired mobile phone.
• To read the messages received and stored. Messages
can be read multiple times.
• To call the SMS text sender using the buttons on the
steering wheel or voice commands.
•
To delete individual messages or the entire inbox using
the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands.
The BLUE&ME™ system can also recognize and read
abbreviations, if any (e.g. “ILUVU” will be read like “I
love you”) and interpret the most usual emoticons (e.g. :-)
will be read like “Smile”), that are currently used to write
SMS texts.
Media Player
With the BLUE&ME™ media player you can play the
digital audio files stored on a USB device by simply
connecting it to the USB port located in the center console
of the car. A second USB port, used for charging only, is
located in the glovebox.
In this way, while you are driving you can play your
favorite music collections.
• iPod® Player — See dedicated paragraph under Me-
dia Player Functions.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
The media player enables the following operations:
• Digital Audio Playback — You can play all your
digital audio files (.mp3, .wma, .wav, .aac) or play a
customized playlist (.m3u or .wpl format).
• Audio File Selection By Category — You can play all
audio files of a certain category, e.g.: album, artist or
genre.
• Playback Options — While playing tracks you can
select the following options: Play, Stop, Next track,
Previous track, Shuffle and Loop track.
NOTE:
• The media player does not support audio files com-
pressed with other formats and DRM (Digital Rights
Management) protected audio files. Non-supported
audio files that may be present on the USB device will
be ignored.
• To use the media player, you have to simply connect
(directly or by an extension lead) your USB device to
the center console USB port. After turning the ignition
key to ON, BLUE&ME™ will start building your
media library. At the end of this operation you can surf
the complete library and scroll its categories as re-
quired using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice
commands. BLUE&ME™ will then play your selection
via the car sound system.
WARNING!
• Driving while distracted can result in loss of ve-
hicle control, accident and injury. It is strongly
recommended that you use extreme caution when
using any device or feature that may take your
focus off the road or your hands off the steering
wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe op-
eration of your vehicle.
(Continued)
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The use of any handheld device while driving is
not recommended. Use voice-operated systems
when possible. Follow all applicable laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
• Keep the Owner’s Manual in the car: when kept in
the car, the Owner’s Manual will be available for
you and other users unfamiliar with the system.
Please make certain that before using the system
for the first time, all persons have access to the
Owner’s Manual and read its instructions and
safety information carefully.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Recline Adjustment
The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard
side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline
lever, lean back until the desired position has been
reached, and release the lever.
Adjusting Bar
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump
the lever downward to lower the seat height.
Recline Lever
Height Adjuster
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
EZ Entry Feature
The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry
feature for rear seat passengers. Pull forward on the
release lever, located on the outboard side of the seatback,
dump the seatback forward, then slide the seat forward
to allow access in and out of the rear seat.
Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to
its locked position once the rear passengers are seated.
Memory Feature
Both front seats have a memory feature, which can
operate in two ways:
Memory Function Option 1 — Full Seat Back And
Track Fore/Aft Position Memory:
After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle and
the Track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the
position they were most recently adjusted to. This is
accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its
last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back is
returned upright.
EZ Entry Lever
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memory Function Option 2 — Seat Back Only
Memory:
After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first
be returned upright prior to going back to the last
fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in
the seat back memory being set only – The track will then
be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory posi-
tion. To then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to
reestablish Memory Function Option 1), the seat has to be
returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track
position as described in Memory Function Option 1.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the center instrument panel area.
Push the switch once to turn on the heated
seats. Push the switch a second time to shut the
heating elements off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear-
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact
the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend
forward minimizing the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to
their normal position following a rear impact. If the
Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal
position, see your authorized dealership immediately.
Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealership.
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occu-
pant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for information on tether routing.
Adjustment Button
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located
on the left kick panel, rearward.
2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the
hood, near the center, and raise the hood.
Hood Release Lever
Hood Safety Latch Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
3. Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left
side when standing in front of the hood) of the engine
compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole of
hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position.
In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop
rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Prop Rod
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals.
NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up-
ward to the first detent for headlight operation.
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
Headlight Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
High Beams
With the low beams activated, push the multi-
function lever towards the instrument panel to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key
or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and
turn on the headlights.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on
with DRL.
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was
purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off using
the display menus. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right
turn or downward to signal a left turn. The correspond-
ing indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to
indicate the operation of the turn signal.
NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when
the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is
returned to a straight position.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by
30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to
a maximum of 210 seconds.
Turn Signal Operation
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
and hold it for more than two seconds.
Interior Lights
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
Position).
Using the switch on the left overhead, push the switch to
the right from its center position and the lights are always
on. Push the switch to the left from its center position and
the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center
position, and the lights are turned on and off when the
doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side
of the overhead console controls the map or reading
function of the lights. Push the switch to the right to turn
on the right light and push the switch to the left to turn
on the left light.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the
switch is in the center position or that the lights are
off to avoid draining the battery.
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
There are four different modes of operation that can be
activated in this position:
• When one door is opened a three minute timer is
activated.
• When the key is removed from the ignition (within
two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10
second timer is activated.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10
second timer is activated.
• When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights
will turn off.
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
• When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is
activated.
NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, just below the radio.
Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Push
the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off.
Fog Light Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-
ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
raised or lowered to access these modes:
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers
will operate intermittently.
Windshield Wiper Operation
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent
but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed.
As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease.
Low Speed
Push the lever downward to the second detent. The
wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers
will operate at high speed.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until
the lever is released. When the lever is released, the
wipers will return to the off position and automatically
shut off.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will
activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is
released.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Rear Windshield Wiper
Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever
upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for intermittent wipe operation. With the front wind-
shield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield
wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate
in the same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at
half the frequency. When the transmission is shifted into
REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically operate at
Low Speed and return to normal operation when the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-
ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Rear Wiper Operation
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the
instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and
hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers
will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever
is released.
TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on
the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal
controls.
Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one
hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock
the column firmly in place.
Tilt Control Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic
Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same
time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control system can
be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the
set speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in
memory.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible
indications of the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist
System Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this
system and recommendations.
The Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE.
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that
is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately
12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the
rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the
corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre-
sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would
clear the underside of the car during the parking maneu-
ver.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Park Assist Warning Display
The Rear Park Assist Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
audible and visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected ob-
stacle. Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙ for
further information.
Rear Park Assist Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
arcs in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show solid arcs in the center rear region and
will produce an audible alert. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show fewer arcs and the
audible alert becomes more frequent.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show solid arcs in the left and/or
right rear region and will produce an audible alert. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show
fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more frequent.
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission
is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the dis-
tance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succes-
sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A
continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12
in (30 cm) away.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present
within the sensors’ field
of view
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the
distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information).
Visual signal (EVIC)
• Arcs are shown based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle. (Refer to “Rear Park
Assist Display” for further information).
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) (where provided).
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the
distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the
distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this
condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is
turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during
maneuvers parallel to walls).
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system is
indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the in-
strument panel warning icon and message displayed on
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) display.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
is displayed on the EVIC display (if equipped).
Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indi-
cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the EVIC shall indicate that the
Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference
to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor
fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system is
turned off automatically.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the va-
por jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in (10
cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
• Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using Rear Park Assist.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your surround-
ings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
• Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve-
hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the warning display turns on the single
flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone. Also,
the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and shape,
giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind
the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead
console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key
Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location acces-
sible to children. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Open
Push and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for
approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at
the vented position. Push the switch a second time and
hold for approximately one second and release, the
sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation,
any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
To Close
With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power
sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second,
the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the
switch a second time and hold for approximately one
second to completely close the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Emergency Operation
In case of electrical failure the sunroof can be operated
with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box.
There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening
at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug reveals a
hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof. Insert
the hex wrench and turn, moving the sunroof to the
desired location.
Sun Shade — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a
fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or
closed. To open the sun shade push the tab and move the
shade to a full open position.
Manual Sun Shade
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet,
located in the floor console, for added convenience. This
power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and
other low power devices.
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or
accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the
heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Location Underhood
F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with great caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
This is located on the center console, in front of the cup
holders. To activate the cigar lighter, push and release the
knob. After a few seconds the knob automatically returns
to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready for use.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot.
To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with
care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned
off.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
CUPHOLDERS
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are lo-
cated on the floor console between the front seats.
For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the
floor between the front driver and passenger seats.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel. Pull outward on the glove compart-
ment latch to open the glove compartment. Push the
glove compartment door upward to close it.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow
increased cargo capacity.
Glove Compartment Latch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Push down the release button, located at the outboard
top of the seatback and move the seatback to its folded-
down position to provide a flat load floor cargo area.
When returning the seatback to its upright position, push
rearward until the seatback is properly latched.
Rear Seat Release Buttons
Folded Rear Seats
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located in the
center of the instrument panel, below the radio.
Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An
indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate when
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20
minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the
button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........141
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................142
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — ECO ...........143
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — POP, LOUNGE,
500C ................................144
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....145
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) ..............................158
▫ EVIC Displays .......................159
▫ EVIC Control Buttons ..................160
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu .........................161
▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System ........163
▫ Trip Computer .......................163
▫ Trip Button ..........................164
▫ Trip Functions .......................165
▫ Values Displayed ......................165
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)............................166
4
䡵 SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO ..............179
▫ Introduction .........................179
▫ Suggestions..........................179
▫ Technical Specifications .................181
▫ Quick Guide .........................182
▫ General Information....................185
▫ Functions And Adjustments ..............186
▫ Radio ..............................193
▫ SiriusXM Satellite Radio — If Equipped......195
▫ CD Player ...........................198
▫ CD MP3 Player .......................200
▫ Troubleshooting.......................202
䡵 iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................204
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......205
▫ Radio Operation ......................206
▫ CD Player Operation ...................206
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped).........................206
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........206
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .207
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................208
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning ......208
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......210
▫ Operating Tips .......................216
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Side Vent 7 — Passenger Air Bag 13 — Storage Compartment
2 — Multifunction Lever – Light Control 8 — Glove Compartment 14 — Shift Lever
3—
Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights
9 — Rear Defrost Button 15 — Sport Button
4 — Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Com-
puter
10 — Hazard Button 16 — Horn/Driver Airbag
5 — Central Air Vents 11 — Climate Controls
6 — Storage Compartment/Radio 12 — Power Windows Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — ECO
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — POP, LOUNGE, 500C
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
2. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator remains on and does not flash, or flashes at
a rapid rate.
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
5. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
7. High Beam Indicator
This light shows that the high beam headlights
are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high
beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights
back to low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the
headlights or park lights are left on, the high beam
indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will
sound.
8. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to
ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the seat belt
reminder light will flash or remain on continuously. Refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system which
monitors the emissions and engine control sys-
tem. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing,
the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on
and remain on, as a bulb check, until the engine is started. If
the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on
for 15 seconds, then blink for 5 seconds, and remain on until
the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not come on during
starting, have the condition investigated promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
10. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
11. Electric Power Steering Malfunction Warning Light
This telltale is on when the Electric Power
Steering is not operating and needs service.
12. Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog
lights are on.
13. Rear Defrost Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the rear win-
dow defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the Anti-lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the ABS, are also equipped with
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on
along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
15. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is
not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
16. Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge/Turbo Gauge/ECO In-
dex Gauge
Depending on what options and trim level, your vehicle
is equipped with there are three gauges available.
• Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge: This gauge shows
what percent the gas pedal is currently depressed at.
• Turbo Gauge: This gauge shows the current turbo
usage.
• ECO Index Gauge: The ECO Index gauge allows the
driver to monitor their driving style in order to
increase fuel economy. The efficiency of the driving
style is displayed on a gauge located on the right
side of the instrument cluster and ranges from a
minimum value of 0 up to a maximum value of 5 (0
= low, 5 = high). A higher “ECO” index indicates a
more fuel efficient drive style and will increase your
fuel economy. A lower “ECO” index indicates fre-
quent accelerations/decelerations and will decrease
your fuel economy. The index is recalculated ap-
proximately every second and takes into account a
combination of the instant fuel economy and your
driving style during the current trip.
NOTE: Different trips may have different values even if
the same driving style is maintained. Some factors that
may impact the calculated index value are:
• Traffic conditions
• Trip duration
• Temperature (engine and ambient)
17. Fuel Gauge
Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
18. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
The EVIC features a driver-interactive display that is
located in the instrument cluster. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
19. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “Cooling
System Pressure Cap” paragraph.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
20. Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions
Per Minute (RPM x 1000).
21. Speedometer / Trip Odometer / Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) Display Area
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument
cluster, all warnings including “door” and “gate” and
“Change Engine Oil” will only be displayed in the EVIC
display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
22. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.0
gallon (3.8L), this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
23. Generic Warning Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if
any of the following conditions occur: Oil
Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor
Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off Intervention,
Fuel Cut-Off Not Available, Parking Sensor Failure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
24. Cruise On Indicator — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel.”
25. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
26. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, imme-
diate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
27. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
28. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. The engine coolant temperature indicator
will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Displays
1. Red Telltales (Left Bank)
• Hood Ajar
• Low Oil Pressure
• Electronic Throttle Control
• Door Ajar
• Speed Limiter — If Equipped
2. Amber Telltales
• Ice Risk
• Fuel Cut Off
• Fuel Cut Off Failed
• Hill Holder Failed
• Oil Change Request
• Check Lights
• Vehicle Lock
3. Electronic Speed Control Active
4. Amber Telltales
• Generic Warning Light
• Glow Plug Light
• Park Sensor Failed
• Stop Lamp Failed
Instrument Cluster
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
5. Red Telltales (Right Bank)
• Trunk Ajar
• Transmission Failure
• Battery Charge Indicator
6. Exceeded Speed Limiter
7. Shift Up or Down Indicators
8. Gear Indicator
EVIC Control Buttons
Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the
EVIC. Push and hold the MENU button (approximately
one second) to return to the main screen.
Push and release the UP
button to scroll upward
through the displayed menu and the related options
or to increase the displayed value.
Push and release the DOWN
button to scroll down-
ward through the displayed menu and the related
options or to decrease the value displayed.
NOTE: UP
and DOWN buttons activate differ-
ent functions according to the following situations:
• To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.
• To increase or decrease values during settings.
NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC
display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers
covered (for versions/markets, where provided) for a
few seconds.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. Push and release the UP
and DOWN but-
tons to access the different options and settings
(setup).
The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MENU
button. A single push on the UP
or DOWN but-
tons will scroll through the setup menu options. The
menu includes the following functions:
• Speed Beep
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
• Set Date
• See Radio
• Speed Display
• Autoclose
• Units
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Button Volume
• Daylights (D.R.L.)
• Hill Start
• Tire Pressure
• Unlock Driver Door First
• Unlock All Doors
• Exit Menu
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select
the main menu option to set.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the main menu option
previously selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Sub-
menu
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display
the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button (by
single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu
options.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select
the displayed submenu option and to open the rel-
evant setup menu.
4. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting for this
submenu option.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the previously selected
submenu option.
6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main
menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (do not
start the engine.)
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays informa-
tion such as trip information, range, fuel consumption,
average speed, and travel time).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
• A short button push displays the different values.
• A long button push resets the system and then starts a
new trip.
New Trip
To reset:
• Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system
manually.
• When the “Trip distance” reaches 9999.9 miles or
kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59
(999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset auto-
matically.
• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the
system.
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be
reset.
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for
over one second to reset.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than
one second.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to
the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing settings.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Range
• Trip distance A
• Average consumption
• Instantaneous consumption
• Average speed A
• Travel time A (driving time)
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip distance B
• Average consumption
• Average speed B
• Travel time B (driving time)
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip
B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption”
cannot be reset.
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message “----” will
appear on the display in the following cases:
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.).
Trip planning must take into account the above notes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Distance Traveled
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Economy
This value shows the approximate average consumption
since the last reset.
Instant Economy
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
display if the car is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a func-
tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Dimmer
The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable
of detecting environmental light conditions and adjust-
ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly.
NOTE: The brightness of the instrument panel may
change while travelling following an event that causes
switching from “day” to “night” conditions (or vice
versa) in the passenger compartment (e.g. in a tunnel, on
avenues in shadows, under bridges, etc.).
To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows:
1. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button to
set the required brightness level.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing settings.
Speed Beep (Speed Limit)
With this function, it is possible to set the car speed limit
(mph or km/h) to immediately alert the driver when the
set limit is exceeded.
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to enter the
Main MENU.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button to
select Speed Beep. Push and release the MENU
button, push and release the UP
or DOWN
buttons to select Speed Limit activation (On) or
deactivation (Off).
3. When the function is activated (On), briefly push and
release the MENU button to display the presently set
activation speed. Pushing the UP
or DOWN
buttons selects the speed limit. Push and release
the MENU button to confirm selection.
NOTE: The setting can be increased or decreased by
5 mph or km/h each time the UP/DOWN button is
pushed for speed settings above 20 mph (32 km/h). To
increase or decrease the set speed rapidly, push and hold
the UP/DOWN button. Save the setting by briefly push-
ing the button when you approach the required setting.
• Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” will
flash on the display.
2. Push and release the DOWN
button. “Off” will
flash on the display.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
Trip B Data (Trip B On)
Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or
deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display.
For further information, see “Trip Computer.”
For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button to
select Trip B data. Push and release the UP or
DOWN
buttons to turn ON or OFF
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
Set Time (Clock)
This function may be used to set the clock through two
submenu items: “Time” and “Mode.”
Proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN buttons to highlight
Set Time — Push and release the MENU button.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button to
navigate the two sub-menu items.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Select the required option and then push and release
the MENU button.
4. When accessing the “Time” sub-menu item, briefly
push and release the MENU button and “hours” will
flash on the display.
5. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
6. Briefly push and release the MENU button and “min-
utes” will flash on the display.
7. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
NOTE:
• The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each
time the UP
or DOWN
button is pushed.
Push and hold the button to increase/decrease the
setting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly pushing
the button when you approach the required setting.
• Briefly push and release the MENU button to return
to the “Time” sub-function.
• When accessing the “Mode” submenu, briefly push
and release the MENU button. The previously set
display format will flash on the display.
• Push and release the UP
or DOWN button to
select “24h” or “12h.”
When you have selected the required settings, briefly
push and release the MENU button to go back to the
Time, Mode sub-menu screen, or push and hold the
MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to
the main screen without storing the settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
Set Date
This function may be used to set the date (day - month -
year).
To change, the date proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN button to highlight
Date, push and release the MENU button and Year
will begin to flash.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button and
“month” will flash on the display.
4. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button and “day”
will flash on the display.
6. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by one unit
each time the UP
or DOWN button is pushed.
Push and hold the UP or DOWN button to
increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting
by briefly pushing the button when you approach the
required setting.
• Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
See Radio (Repeat Audio Information)
With this function active, the EVIC display shows infor-
mation relevant to the sound system.
• Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tuning
activation or AutoStore.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• CD audio, CD MP3: track number.
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system
info displaying, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or Down button to highlight
See Radio and push and release the MENU button.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate
“BLUE&ME™ Radio Supplement” for further informa-
tion.
Speed Display
When this function is activated the cluster will display
the vehicle speed (MPH or km/h).
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the speed display
feature, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN button to highlight
Speed Display. Push and release the MENU button
to enter the Speed Display MENU.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN
button to
select display deactivation “Off”, “MPH” or “km/h.”
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Autoclose
With this function active, the doors will automatically
lock at when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h).
To change the setting proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push the
UP
or DOWN button to highlight Autoclose.
Push and release the MENU button to enter Auto-
close MENU.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
Units (Set Units)
This function may be used to set the measurement unit in
three submenus: “Distance,” “Temperature” and “Fuel
Economy, and Tire Pressure.”
To set the required unit, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN button to highlight
Units. Push and release the MENU button to enter
Units MENU.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button to
navigate the three sub-menus.
3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly push
and release the MENU button.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. When accessing the “Distance” submenu, briefly push
and release the MENU button. Either “mi” or “km”
will appear on the display (according to the previous
setting).
5. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
6. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to
the sub-menu.
7. When accessing the “Fuel Economy” submenu, briefly
push and release the MENU button. Either “mpg,”
“km/l ” or “l/100km” will appear on the display
(according to the previous setting).
If the distance unit set is “mi,” the fuel economy unit will
be displayed in “mpg.”
If the distance unit set is “km,” the fuel economy unit will
be displayed in either km/l or l/100km.
1. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to
the sub-menu.
3. When accessing the “Temperature” submenu: briefly
push and release the MENU button. Either “°F” or
“°C” will appear on the display (according to the
previous setting).
4. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to
the Tire Pressure — PSI/KPA sub-menu.
When you have made the required settings, briefly push
and release the MENU button to go back to the sub-menu
screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing the settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Language (Selecting The Language)
The messages can be displayed in the following lan-
guages: Italian, English, Turkce, Nederlands, Spanish,
French, Dutch, Polish, Brasilian.
To set the required language, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN button to highlight
Language. Push and release the MENU button to
enter the Language MENU.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning
Buzzer Volume)
With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany-
ing any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to
one of eight volume levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN button, then high-
light the Buzzer Volume. Push and release the
MENU button to enter the Buzzer Volume MENU.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Volume (Button Volume Adjustment)
This function may be used to adjust the volume of the
beep accompanying the buttons. MENU,UP
or
DOWN buttons can be adjusted according to 8
levels.
To adjust the volume, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN button to highlight
the Buzzer Volume, push and release the MENU
button.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to go back to the
main screen without storing the settings.
Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For S.B.R.
Indication)
This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group
Automobiles dealership has deactivated the S.B.R. sys-
tem.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This function may be used to activate / deactivate the
Daytime Running Lamps.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the Up
or DOWN button to highlight
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). Push and release
the MENU button to enter the DRL MENU.
2. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” or
“Off” will flash on the display (according to previous
setting).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
3. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
4. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
GSI (Gear Shift Indicator)
This function may be used to set the Gear Shift Indicator
in two submenus: “Fuel Econ On” and “Fuel Econ Off.”
• Fuel Econ On – turns on a fuel economy upshift light
in the instrument cluster, for optimum fuel economy,
when operating in base driving mode.
• Fuel Econ Off – the fuel economy upshift light is
disabled.
To set the required unit, proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display
the two sub-menus.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button to
navigate the two sub-menus.
3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly push
and release the MENU button.
4. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to
the sub-menu.
When you have made the required settings, briefly push
and release the MENU button to go back to the sub-menu
screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing the settings.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Hill Start Assist
This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop
on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of
brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of
time after the foot has been removed from the brake
pedal.
Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN button to highlight
the Hill Start Assist. Push and release the MENU
button to enter the Hill Start Assist MENU.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button for
setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen without storing the settings.
Tire Pressure
This function will be used to display the tire pressures
individually for all four tires by location.
Proceed as follows:
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and
release the UP
or DOWN button to highlight
the Tire Pressure. Push and release the MENU
button to enter the Tire Pressure MENU.
2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to scroll
through all four tire pressure value locations.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back
to the menu screen, or push and hold the button
(approximately one second) to go back to the main
screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
Lock
When Unlock Driver Door is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Unlock
Drivers Door is selected, you must push the RKE trans-
mitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger
door. When All Doors is selected, both of the doors will
unlock on the first push of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK
button. To make your selection, push and release the
SELECT button until “Unlock Driver Door” or “All
Doors” appears.
Exit Menu
This function closes the initial menu screen.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to
the main screen.
Push and release the
button to return to the first
menu option (Speed Beep).
Push and release the
button to return to the last
menu option (Daylights).
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO
Introduction
The radio has been designed according to the specifica-
tions of the passenger compartment, with a personalized
design to match the style of the dashboard.
If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate
“BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information.
The instructions for use are given below and we recom-
mend you to read them carefully.
Suggestions
Road Safety
Please, learn how to use all different radio functions (e.g.
store stations) before beginning to drive.
Reception Conditions
Reception conditions change constantly while driving.
Reception may be interfered with by the presence of
mountains, buildings or bridges, or when you are far
away from the broadcaster.
RAB Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
WARNING!
Having the volume turned up high can cause the
driver to not be able to hear important traffic sounds,
i.e. sirens, horns, etc. Failure to hear traffic sounds
and other important audible information can result
in serious injury or death. Always adjust the volume
so that you can still hear background noises.
Care And Maintenance
Clean the cover with a soft antistatic cloth only. Cleaning
and polishing products could damage the surface.
CDs
The presence of dirt, scratches or distortions on the CDs
could cause skipping and poor sound quality while it is
playing. For optimal playback conditions, follow these
guidelines:
• Only use branded CDs.
• Clean every CD thoroughly removing any finger
marks or dust using a soft cloth. Hold CDs by the
outside and clean them from the middle outwards.
• Never use chemicals (e.g. antistatics or thinners or
sprays) for cleaning as they could damage the surface
of the CDs.
• After listening to them place CDs back in their boxes to
prevent them from being damaged.
• Do not expose CDs to direct sunlight, high tempera-
tures or moisture for long periods.
• Do not stick labels on the CD surface or write on the
recorded surface with pencils or pens.
• Do not use CDs that are very scratched, flawed,
distorted, etc. Using discs like these will result in
malfunctions or damage to the player.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The use of original CD media is required for the best
quality audio production. Correct operation is not
guaranteed when CD-R/RW media are used that were
not correctly burned and/or with a maximum capacity
above 650 Mb.
• Do not use commercially available protective sheets
for CDs or discs, with stabilizers, etc. as they could get
stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc.
• If a copy-protected CD is used, it may take a few
seconds before the system starts to play it. The CD
player cannot be guaranteed to play all protected
discs. The fact that the CD is protected from being
copied is often shown in very small letters or is
difficult to read on the actual CD cover where it may
be, for example, “COPY CONTROL,” “COPY PRO-
TECTED,” “THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A
PC/MAC.”
• The CD player is capable of reading most compression
systems currently in use, following the development of
these systems, the reading of all compression formats
is not guaranteed.
Technical Specifications
The complete system consists of:
• Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers, one
speaker in each of the front doors.
• Two 22 mm diameter tweeter speakers, one speaker in
each of the front pillars.
• Two 100 mm diameter full range speakers, one speaker
in each of the rear side panels.
• Antenna on the car roof.
• Radio with CD/MP3 player.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
With Alpine Premium Audio system (if equipped):
• Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers.
• Two 11 mm tweeter speakers in the front pillars.
• Two 100 mm full range speakers, one speaker in each
of the rear side panels.
• An amplifier in the trunk on the right-hand side panel.
• Antenna on the car roof.
• Radio with CD/MP3 player.
With BEATS Premium Audio system (if equipped):
• A subwoofer in the trunk on the left-hand side panel.
Quick Guide
Radio Controls
BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE
On Short button push
Off Short button push
TUNER AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) source selection Short repeated button push
A-B-C Cycles A, B, C presets for AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) Short repeated button push
MEDIA CD/AUX/Media Player (if equipped and present)
source selection
Short repeated button push
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE
(Mute/Pause
Button)
Volume activation/deactivation
(Mute/Pause)
Short button push
AUDIO Audio adjustments: low tones
(BASS), high tones (TREBLE), left/
right balance (BALANCE), front/
rear balance (FADER)
Menu activation: short button push
Adjustment type selection: push
or
Adjustment of values: push
or
(Information
Button)
Song, Artist, Album, Genre, Play-
list, Folder information (if avail-
able) in CD, Media Player and Sat-
ellite (if so equipped); Toggles
RBDS information in FM
MENU Advanced functions adjustment Menu activation: short button push
Adjustment type selection: push
or
Adjustment of values: push
or
+Vol/–Vol Volume adjustment Push + button: volume increase
Push – button: volume decrease
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
BUTTON RADIO FUNCTIONS MODE
Radio Station Search:
• Automatic Search
• Manual Search
Automatic search: push buttons
or (long push for fast
forward)
Manual search: push buttons
or
(long push for fast forward)
12345 Current radio station storing Long button push for memory
preset 1 to 5 respectively
Stored station recall Short button push for memory
preset 1 to 5 respectively
BUTTON CD FUNCTIONS MODE
CD ejection Short button push
Previous/next track play Short button push
or
CD track fast forward/rewind Long button push
or
Previous/next folder play
(for CD-MP3)
Short button push
or
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Information
The radio offers the following functions:
Radio Section
• PLL tuning with FM/AM bands
• RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System)
• Automatic/manual station tuning
• FM Multipath detector
• Manual storing of 25 stations (base radio) and 40
stations (if equipped with Satellite): 15 on FM band (5
on FMA, 5 on FMB, 5 on FMC), 10 on AM band (5 on
AMA, 5 on AMB), 15 on Satellite Band - if equipped (5
on SATA, 5 on SATB, 5 on SATC)
• SPEED VOLUME function: Customer selectable auto-
matic volume adjustment depending on the car speed
• Automatic Stereo/Mono selection
CD Section
• Track selection (forward/backward)
• Fast forward/rewind through tracks
• CD Display function: display of track number and on
mp3 discs (song title, artist) and time elapsed since
start of the track
• Playing Audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW
CAUTION!
On multimedia CDs, besides audio tracks, there are
data tracks too. Playing this type of CD could cause
hissing at a volume that could damage the speakers.
CD/MP3 Section
• MP3-Info function (ID3-TAG)
• Folder selection (previous/next)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
• Track selection (forward/backward)
• Fast forward/rewind through tracks
• MP3 Display function: display of folder name, ID3-
TAG information, time elapsed since the start of the
track, name of the file
• Playing audio or data CD, CD-R and CD-RW
Audio Section
• Mute/pause function
• Soft mute function
• Loudness function
• Graphic 7 band equalizer (if equipped)
• Separate bass/treble tone adjustment
• Right/left channel balancing
• Front/rear fader
Functions And Adjustments
Turning The Car Radio On
The car radio comes on when the
(ON/OFF) button
is pushed briefly.
When the car radio is turned on and the on volume limit
is on, the volume is limited to a setting of five even if it
had been set higher when previously used.
Turning The Car Radio Off
Push the
(ON/OFF) button to turn the radio off.
Selecting The Radio Functions
By pushing the TUNER button briefly and repeatedly, the
following audio sources can be selected cyclically:
• AM, FM and Satellite Bands (if equipped)
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting The CD Function
By briefly pushing the MEDIA button, the CD audio
source can be selected (only if a CD is loaded).
Volume Adjustment
To adjust the volume, push the buttons +Vol or –Vol to
increase/decrease the volume.
Mute/Pause Function
Push the
button briefly to activate the MUTE func-
tion. The volume will gradually decrease and the
wording “TUNER Mute” will be shown on the display
(in radio mode) or “CD Pause” (in CD mode).
Push the
button again to deactivate the MUTE
function. The volume will gradually increase until it
reaches the previously set level.
When the volume level is changed using the dedicated
controls, the Mute function is deactivated and the vol-
ume is adjusted to the new level selected.
Audio Adjustment
The functions that can be selected from the audio menu
change depending on the context: AM/FM/MEDIA/
SATELLITE.
Push the AUDIO button briefly to change the Audio
functions. After the AUDIO button is first pushed, the
display will show the Bass level value for the source
activated at that time (e.g. in FM mode the display will
show the wording “FM Bass +2”).
Use the buttons
or to scroll through the Menu
functions. To change the setting of the selected func-
tion, use the
or buttons.
The current status of the selected function appears on the
display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
The functions managed by the Audio Menu are:
• BASS (Bass adjustment)
• MIDRANGE (Midrange adjustment)
• TREBLE (Treble adjustment)
• BALANCE (right/left Balance adjustment)
• FADER (front/rear Balance adjustment)
• LOUDNESS — if equipped (Loudness function
activation/deactivation)
• EQUALIZER — if equipped (activation and selection
of factory equalization adjustments)
• USER EQUALIZER — if equipped (customized equal-
ization adjustment)
Tone Adjustment
Proceed as follows:
1. Push the AUDIO button.
2. Push the
or button to select “Bass,” “Mid-
range” or “Treble” in the AUDIO menu.
3. Push the
or button to increase/decrease the
bass or treble adjustments.
By pushing the
or buttons briefly, the levels will
change progressively. By pushing them down longer,
the levels will change quickly.
Balance Adjustment
Proceed as follows:
1. Push the AUDIO button.
2. Push the
or button to set “Balance” in the
AUDIO menu.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Push the
button to increase the sound from the
left speakers or the
button to increase the sound
from the right speakers.
By pushing the
or buttons briefly, the levels will
change progressively. By pushing them down longer,
the levels will change quickly.
Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs
at the same level.
Fader Adjustment
Proceed as follows:
1. Push the AUDIO button.
2. Push the
or button to set “Fader” in the
AUDIO menu.
3. Push the
button to increase the sound coming
from the rear speakers or the
button to increase
the sound coming from the front speakers.
By pushing the
or buttons briefly, the levels will
change progressively. By pushing them down longer,
the levels will change quickly.
Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs
at the same level.
Loudness Function — If Equipped
The Loudness function improves the volume of the
sound while listening at low volumes, increasing the bass
and treble.
To activate/deactivate this function, select the “Loud-
ness” setting in the AUDIO menu. The condition of the
function (on or off) is shown on the display for a few
seconds by the wording “Loudness On” or “Loudness
Off”.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Preset/User/Classic/Rock/Jazz Functions — If
Equipped
The built-in equalizer can be activated/deactivated.
When the equalizer function is off, the audio settings can
only be changed by adjusting the “Bass” and “Treble”
settings, whereas when the function is on, the acoustic
curves can be adjusted. To deactivate the equalizer, select
the “EQ Preset” function in the audio menu.
To activate the equalizer, use the AUDIO button to select
one of the adjustments:
• “EQ User” (adjustment of 7 equalizer bands that can
be changed by the user)
• “Classic” (equalizer preset for optimal classic music
sound)
• “Rock” (equalizer preset for optimal rock and pop
music sound)
•
“Jazz” (equalizer preset for optimal jazz music sound)
When one of the equalizer adjustments is activated the
wording “EQ” lights up.
User EQ Settings Function — If Equipped
To set a personalized equalizer adjustment:
1. Push the AUDIO button.
2. Use the
or buttons to set EQ function.
3. Use
or buttons to select ⬙EQ User.⬙
4. Push the MENU button to start adjusting equalizer.
5. On the display a seven bar graph will appear, in which
each bar represents a frequency. Select the bar to be
adjusted by using the
or buttons. The selected
bar will start to flash and it can be adjusted using
or buttons.
6.
To store the setting, push the MENU or AUDIO buttons.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Menu
MENU Button Functions
Push the MENU button briefly to activate the Menu function.
Use the
or buttons to scroll through the menu
functions. To change the setting of the selected func-
tion, use the
or buttons.
The current status of the selected function appears on the
display.
The functions managed by the Menu are:
• Speech Volume
• Aux Audio Offset
• Radio Off
• Sat ID
• SiriusXM Telephone Number
• System Reset
• Speed Volume
• On Volume Limit
Push the MENU button again to exit the Menu function.
Speed Volume Function — If Equipped
This function automatically adapts the volume level to
the speed of the car, turning up the volume when the
speed increases to maintain the ratio with the noise level
inside the passenger compartment. To activate/
deactivate the function, use the buttons. The wording
“Speed volume” appears on the display, followed by the
current status of the function:
• Off: function deactivated
• Low: function activated (low sensitivity)
• High: function activated (high sensitivity)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
On Volume Limit
This function makes it possible to activate/deactivate the
maximum volume limit when turning the radio on.
The display shows the function status:
• “On volume limit: on” – when the radio is turned on
the volume level will be:
– If the volume level is equal to or higher than the
maximum value, the radio will come on at the
maximum volume.
– If the volume level is between the minimum and
maximum values, the radio will come on at the
same volume as before it was switched off.
– If the volume level is equal to or lower than the
minimum value, the radio will come on at the
minimum volume.
• “On volume limit: off” – The radio will come on at the
same volume as before it was switched off. The
volume level can be between 0 and 40.
Use the buttons
or to change the setting.
NOTE:
• Using the Menu it is only possible to adjust the
activation/deactivation of the function and not the
minimum or maximum volume value.
• If the battery charge is too low, the volume cannot be
adjusted between the minimum and the maximum
level.
Radio Off Function
This function makes it possible to set the radio switching
off mode by choosing between two methods.
The chosen mode appears on the display:
• “Radio off: 00 min” — The radio turns off in connec-
tion with the ignition key; the radio is turned auto-
matically off as soon as the key is turned to the STOP
position.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• “Radio off: 20 min” — The radio turns off indepen-
dently from the ignition key; the radio remains on for
a maximum period of 20 minutes after the key has
been turned to the STOP position.
System Reset Function
This function is used to restore all settings to the factory
values. The options are:
• NO — No restore intervention.
• YES — The default parameters will be restored. Dur-
ing such operation, the wording “Resetting” appears
on the display. At the end of the operation, the source
does not change and the previous situation will be
displayed.
Radio
(Tuner) Introduction
When the car radio is turned on, the last function that
was selected before turning it off (Radio, CD, CD MP3,
AUX) is activated.
To select the Radio function when another audio source is
being listened to, briefly push the TUNER button.
Once the Radio mode has been activated, the display will
show the name (RBDS stations only) or the frequency of
the selected radio station, the frequency band selected
(e.g. FMA) and the preset button number (e.g. P1).
Frequency Band Selection
With the Radio mode active, press the FM or AM tuner
button briefly and repeatedly to select the desired recep-
tion band.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
Each time the button is pressed the following bands are
selected cyclically:
• AM, FM or SAT (if equipped)
Each band is highlighted by the corresponding wordings
on the display. The radio will be tuned to last station
selected on the respective frequency band.
Preset Buttons
The buttons numbered from 1 to 5 are used to set the
following pre-selections:
• 15 in the FM band (5 in FMA, 5 in FMB, 5 in FMC)
• 10 in the AM band (5 in AMA, 5 in AMB)
• 15 in SAT (if so equipped) (5 SATA, 5 SATB, 5 SATC)
To listen to a preset station, select the desired frequency
band and then briefly push the corresponding preset
button (from 1 to 5).
By pushing the preset button for more than two seconds,
the tuned station will be stored. Pushing the A-B-C
button will change between the preset memory group in
the current frequency band.
Automatic Tuning
Briefly push the
or button to start the automatic
tuning search for the next station that can be received
in the selected direction.
If the
or button is pushed for longer, the rapid
search is started. When the button is released, the
tuner will stop on the next station that can be received.
Manual Tuning
This is used to manually search for stations in the
preselected band.
Select the desired frequency band and then push briefly
and repeatedly the
or button to start the search in
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the desired direction. If the or button is pushed
longer, the fast search starts and then stops when the
button is released.
Stereophonic Broadcasters
If the incoming signal is weak, the reproduction is
automatically switched from Stereo to Mono.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio — If Equipped
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
With over 130 channels, SiriusXM Satellite Radio brings
you more of what you love. Get 69 channels of 100%
commercial-free music, plus all of your favorite sports,
news, talk and entertainment. Hear every NFL game,
every NASCAR race, college sports and more. The big-
gest and most compelling names in talk with Howard
Stern and Martha Stewart, laugh-out-loud comedy with
Jamie Foxx’s The Foxxhole and Blue Collar Comedy, plus
kids’ programming, world-class news, local traffic and
weather. All of this with crystal clear, coast-to-coast
coverage. Everything worth listening to is now on
SiriusXM. A one-year SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscrip-
tion is included. SiriusXM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription,
sold separately after trial subscription included with
vehicle purchase. Prices and programming are provided
by SiriusXM and are subject to change. Subscriptions
governed by Terms & Conditions available at
www.siriusxm.com/customeragreement. SiriusXM Ra-
dio U.S. service only available to those at least 18 years of
age in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., and PR.
Service available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Program Types
Program Types can be selected by pushing the
or
buttons. The Program Type will change to the next
category and the radio will then tune to first station in
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
that program type. Pushing
or buttons will tune
to only the stations in that program type.
Pushing the
or buttons until ⬙All⬙ is displayed
will allow normal tuning to all stations.
The Program Types available are: All, Pop, Rock,
Electronic/Dance, Hip-Hop/R&B, Country, Christian,
Jazz/Standards, Classical, Latin/World, Sports, Enter-
tainment, Talk, News, NPR, Comedy, Family & Health,
Religion, Traffic/Weather.
You can find the SiriusXM current terms and conditions
at www.siriusxm.com.
Re-Subscribe To SiriusXM Satellite Radio
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with their radio. Following expiration of the free services,
it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
Press the UP/DOWN button to scroll through the Menu
Functions, and the Left/Right button to change the
selected Set-up Menu function.
Write down the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) for your
receiver. To retrieve the Electronic Serial Number of
SiriusXM Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0.
Make sure that when the order is placed, the ESN are
correct. If any of the ESN numbers are not entered
correctly, then the SiriusXM subscription will not be able
to be transferred to the new radio and will not be active
when installed in the customer’s vehicle. To reactivate
your service, either call the number listed on the display
or visit the provider online.
CAUTION!
Neither SIRIUS nor FIAT is responsible for any
errors in accuracies in the SIRIUS data services or its
use in vehicles.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks
of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. SiriusXM
Radio requires a subscription, sold separately after trial
subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and
programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject
to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms & Condi-
tions available at www.siriusxm.com/
customeragreement. SiriusXM Radio U.S. service only
available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48
contiguous United States, D.C., & PR. www.siriusxm-
.com.
Sirius Subscription Issues When Replacing A
Sirius Radio
When a radio needs to be replaced, the Dealer will need
the SIRIUS information to order a new radio (even if the
SIRIUS subscription has lapsed). The ESN number con-
tains 12 digits.
The following are instructions for retrieving the Elec-
tronic Serial Number (ESN) from FIAT 500 NAFTA model
radios:
To retrieve the ESN of SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module
tune to Channel 0. Make sure that when the order is
placed, the ESN are correct. If any of the ESN numbers
are not entered correctly, then the SIRIUS subscription
will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and
will not be active when installed in the customer’s
vehicle.
Satellite Radio Antenna — If Equipped
The antenna for the satellite radio is mounted on the roof
of the vehicle. Do not place items on the roof around the
roof top antenna location. Objects placed within the line
of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance.
Larger luggage items should be placed as far from the
antenna as possible. Do not place items directly on or
above the antenna.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
CD Player
Introduction
This chapter describes the operation of the CD player
only. To operate the radio, refer to the description in the
“Functions and Adjustments” chapter.
CD Player Selection
To activate the CD player built into the equipment,
proceed as follows:
• Load a CD with the equipment switched on. The first
track will start to play.
Or
• If a CD has already been loaded, turn on the radio and
then briefly push the MEDIA button to select the “CD”
function mode. The last track listened to will start to
play.
It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure optimal
playing. If CD-R/RWs are used, we recommend using
good quality media that are burned at the slowest speed
possible.
CD Loading/Ejecting
To load the CD, insert it gently into the slot to activate the
motorized loading system, which will position it cor-
rectly.
The CD can be loaded with the radio off and the ignition
key turned to ON/RUN. In this case, the radio will
remain off. When the radio is turned on, the last source
listened to before being switched off, will be activated.
When a CD is inserted, the display will show the symbol
“CD” and the wording “CD Reading.” They will remain
displayed for the whole time required for the radio to
read the CD. When this time has elapsed the radio
automatically starts playing the first track.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the
button with the radio turned on, to
activate the motorized CD ejection system. After ejec-
tion, the last audio source listened to before playing
the CD will be heard.
If the CD is not removed from the radio, it will automati-
cally be reloaded about 20 seconds later but will not
resume playing until the ⬙MEDIA⬙ button is pushed to
select the CD mode. The radio will switch to the last
source prior to CD mode.
The CD cannot be ejected if the radio is off.
Possible Error Messages
If the loaded CD cannot be read (e.g. a CD ROM has been
inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way or there is
a reading error) the display shows the wording “CD Disc
error.”
The CD will then be ejected and the audio source
activated before the CD mode selection will be heard.
A CD which cannot be read will not be ejected until these
functions are over. At the end, with the CD mode
activated, the display will show the wording “CD Disc
error” for a few seconds and then the CD will be ejected.
Display Information
When the CD player is operating, information will ap-
pear on the display with the following meaning:
• “Track 5” indicates the CD track number.
• “03:42” indicates the time elapsed since the start of the
track (if the relevant Menu function is activated).
Track Selection
Briefly push the
button to play the previous CD
track and the
button to play the next track. The
tracks are selected cyclically: the first track is selected
after the last track and vice versa.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds,
pushing the
button, starts the track again from the
beginning. In this case, if you want to play the
previous track, push the
button twice consecu-
tively.
Track Fast Forward/Rewind
Keep the
button pushed down to fast forward the
selected track and keep the
button pushed down to
fast rewind the track. The fast forward/rewind will
stop once the button is released.
Pause Function
To pause the CD player, push the
button. The word-
ing “CD Pause” appears on the display.
To resume listening to the track, push the
button
again.
CD MP3 Player
Introduction
This chapter describes the operation of the CD MP3
player.
NOTE: Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed
from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.
MP3 Mode
In addition to playing regular audio CDs, the radio is also
enabled to play CDROMs on which compressed audio
files have been recorded in an MP3 format.
To guarantee optimal reproduction, it is advisable to use
good quality CDs burned at the lowest speed possible.
The files on an MP3 CD are structured in folders that
create lists of all the folders containing MP3 tracks
(folders or subfolders are all on the same level). The
folders that do not contain MP3 tracks cannot be selected.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The specifications and operating conditions for playing
MP3 files are the following:
• The CD-ROMs used should be burned in accordance
with ISO standard 9660.
• The music files should have the extension “.mp3” or
“.wma” files with a different extension will not be
reproduced.
• The sampling frequencies that can be reproduced are:
44.1 kHz, stereo (from 96 to 320 kbit/s) – 22.05 kHz,
mono or stereo (from 32 to 80 kbit/s).
• Tracks with a variable bit-rate can be reproduced.
NOTE: The track names must not include the following
characters: spaces, ‘ (apostrophes), ( and ) (open and close
brackets). During the burning of a MP3 CD, make sure
that the names of the files do not contain these characters;
if not, the radio will not be able to play the tracks
involved.
Selecting MP3 Sessions With Hybrid Discs
If a hybrid disc is inserted (Mixed Mode, Enhanced,
CD-Extra) also containing MP3 files, the radio automati-
cally starts playing the audio session. It is possible to
move to the MP3 session while playing by keeping the
CD button pressed for more than two seconds.
NOTE: When the function is activated the radio may take
a few seconds to start playing. While checking the disc
the display will show “CD Reading.” If no MP3 files are
detected, the radio will resume playing the audio session
from the point where it was interrupted.
Display Information
ID3–Tag Information Display
In addition to the information relating to the time
elapsed, folder name and file name, the radio is also
capable of displaying ID3–TAG information relating to
Title Track, Artist and Author.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
When one of the ID3-TAG pieces of information is chosen
to be displayed (Title, Artist, Album) and this informa-
tion has not been recorded for the track played, the text
⬙UNKNOWN⬙ will be displayed for that field.
Selection Of Next/Previous Folder
Push the
button to select a next folder or the
button to select the previous folder. The display
will show the number of the folder.
The folders are selected cyclically. The first folder is
selected after the last folder and vice versa.
If no other folder/track is selected in the next two
seconds, the first track on the new folder will be played.
After the last track in a folder is played, the next folder
will be played.
Structure Of The Folders
The radio with MP3 player:
• Recognizes only the folders that effectively contain
MP3 format files.
• If the MP3 files on a CD-ROM are structured in
sub-folders their structure is compressed to a single
level structure, where the sub-folders are taken to the
level of the main folders.
Troubleshooting
General
Sound Volume Low
The Fader function should be adjusted to the values “F”
(front) only to prevent the reduction in radio output
power and the cancelling of the volume if the Fader level
adjustment is equal to R+9.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Source Can Not Be Selected
Nothing has been loaded. Load the CD or the MP3 CD to
be listened to.
CD Player
The CD Does Not Play:
The CD is dirty. Clean the CD.
The CD is scratched. Try using another CD.
The CD Can Not Be Loaded:
A CD is already loaded. Press the
button and remove
the CD.
MP3 File Reading
Track Skips While Playing Mp3 Files:
The CD is scratched or dirty.
The Duration Of The Mp3 Tracks Is Not Correctly
Displayed:
In some cases (due to the recording mode) the duration of
the MP3 tracks can be displayed incorrectly.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone
Refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual”
for further information.
Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND)
A Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) is avail-
able as optional equipment for this vehicle, refer to the
Navigation User Guide for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB or AUX port, located in the center
console.
Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ radio User’s Manual
for iPod® or external USB device support capability.
USB/AUX Port
1 — Auxiliary Cable Jack
2 — USB Connector
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to
select/enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
CD Player Operation
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ User’s Manual for
further information.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary
dials and one inner push knob.
1. Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to
the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
2. Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds.
3. Recirculation Control
Rotate this control to change the system between recir-
culation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather could cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se-
lect the outside air position for maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without dis-
turbing the mode control selection.
4. Mode Control
Rotate this control to change the system between Modes
(Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost).
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be ad-
justed to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor
outlets.
• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
• Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-
ture on the windshield.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and
side window demister outlets. Use this mode
with maximum blower and temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix
or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is
not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
only when necessary.
5. A/C Button
Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will
illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation
modes at the same time.
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows the
occupant to select a comfort settings.
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for op-
timum comfort and convenience.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
comfort level desired by the occupant.
1. AUTO Temperature Control (ATC) Button
Controls airflow, temperature, distribution, and air recir-
culation automatically. Push and release to select. Per-
forming this function will cause the ATC to switch
between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to
“Automatic Operation” for more information.
2. A/C Button
Push and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting. Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode.
3. Temperature Control Up Button
Provides temperature up control. Push the button for
warmer temperature settings.
4. Blower Control Up/Down Buttons
There are 12 fixed blower speeds. The blower control
up/down buttons regulate the amount of air forced
through the system in any mode you select. The blower
speed increases as you push, or hold, the blower control
up button and decreases when you push, or hold, the
blower control down button.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
The blower fan speed may be set to any fixed speed by
pushing the blower control up or down buttons. The fan
will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds
are selected. This allows the front occupants to control
the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
AUTO mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the following positions.
5. Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demister outlets. This setting works best
in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode.
6. Front Defrost
Push and release to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates
when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield
and side window demist outlets. When the defrost but-
ton is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting and defogging. Per-
forming this function will cause the ATC to switch into
manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the
climate system will return the previous setting.
7. Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demister outlets. Performing this function
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow. Performing this function will cause the ATC to
switch into manual mode.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
9. Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor
mode button to enter Bi-Level mode, the indicators
illuminate when ON. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch into manual mode.
10. Temperature Control Down Button
Provides temperature down control. Push the button for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: If the temperature is lowered until ⬙Lo⬙ is dis-
played, all high voltage Heating, Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning (HVAC) systems are deactivated and am-
bient air is circulated according to the Heating, Ventila-
tion, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) control settings.
11. Climate Control ON/OFF Button
Push and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF.
12. Recirculation Control Button
Push and release to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when ON.
NOTE: When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button
will flash if pushed. This indicates that you can not
proceed to this mode due to fogging risk.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Climate Control Functions
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
outlets. If Economy mode is desired, push the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and
deactivate the A/C system.
NOTE:
• If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can
be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active
to prevent fogging of the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humid-
ity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to
recirculate interior air by pushing the RECIRCULATION
control button. Recirculation mode should only be used
temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate when
this button is selected. Push the button a second time to
turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside
air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (indicator light shall blink) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Con-
trols, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
mode to improve window clearing operation. Recircula-
tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is se-
lected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel, the indicator will illuminate
when on.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the temperature con-
trol buttons. Once the desired temperature is dis-
played, the system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features”
in this section of the manual.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Manual Operation
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on
will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air
direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
Defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au-
tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce
or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Summer Operation
NOTE: In some cases during high temperature opera-
tion, the air conditioning system performance may be
reduced. This is to help protect the engine from overheat-
ing during the high load condition.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use Recir-
culation A/C mode to provide additional comfort while
in automatic mode.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
tions.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air using the high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the air conditioning system
is started again.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
Operating Tips Chart
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................223
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......223
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....223
▫ Normal Starting.......................223
▫ Cold Weather Operation ................224
▫ Extended Park Starting..................224
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................225
▫ After Starting ........................226
▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” ..............226
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .226
▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission...........226
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds ..............228
▫ Downshifting ........................229
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED .........................229
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............231
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .231
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission .........231
▫ Gear Ranges .........................233
5
䡵 AUTOSTICK ..........................238
▫ Operation ...........................238
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........239
▫ Acceleration .........................239
▫ Traction ............................240
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............240
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................241
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................241
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................242
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................244
䡵 SPORT MODE .........................246
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped........246
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped......247
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................248
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .248
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .248
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............250
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............251
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................251
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........252
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light ............255
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............256
▫ Tire Markings ........................256
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........260
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........262
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........263
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........268
▫ Tire Pressure ........................268
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................269
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .271
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................271
▫ Tire Types ...........................272
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............274
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............274
▫ Tire Spinning ........................276
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................277
▫ Life Of Tire .........................278
▫ Replacement Tires .....................278
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......280
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....282
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) ..............................283
▫ Base System .........................285
▫ Enhanced System — If Equipped ..........288
▫ Premium TPM System ..................288
▫ General Information ...................292
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Engine .......293
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo ........293
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................294
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............294
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......295
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................295
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................295
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................296
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............297
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................297
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............297
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............299
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................299
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ............299
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .299
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-
TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock-
ing ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Depress the
brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START)
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Cold Weather Operation
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an
engine block heater has not been used. An externally-
powered electric engine block heater is available as
optional equipment or from your authorized dealer.
The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is
below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
CAUTION!
Use of the recommended oil and adhering to the
prescribed oil change intervals is important to pre-
vent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting
in cold conditions.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-
ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
Turbocharger “Cool Down”
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump
will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been
shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet opera-
tion, it is normal to hear it running during this time.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Five-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE: To shift into REVERSE from NEUTRAL, lift the
ring under the knob and, at the same time move the
gearshift lever to the right and then backward.
Use each gear in numerical order; do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, not third, when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in third gear.
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch.
REVERSE gear is not synchronized and the vehicle must
be at a complete stop to shift into REVERSE gear. When
selecting REVERSE gear, the driver should pause (ap-
proximately 2 seconds) after pushing in the clutch pedal
and prior to shifting into REVERSE which allows gears to
stop spinning. Should an unwanted clash noise be pro-
duced, the pause length should be increased.
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
NOTE:
• Clashing REVERSE gear, especially if vehicle is mov-
ing, can result in transmission damage.
• During cold weather, until the transmission lubricant
is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the trans-
mission.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following
table.
Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds
Units In mph (km/h)
Engine Size Acceleration
Rate
1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5
1.4L/1.4L Turbo
Engine
Accel 14
(23)
23
(37)
29
(47)
38
(61)
Cruise 12
(19)
18
(29)
25
(40)
32
(52)
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
the clutch and the transmission can result from
skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting
at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal
is held pressed (i.e., not released).
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift down
to second or first gear when descending a steep grade.
When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade, down-
shift early so that the engine will not be overburdened.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-
wanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be re-
moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position, and once removed, the transmis-
sion is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter-
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer
to “AutoStick” in this section for further information).
Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while
in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE position)
will manually select the transmission gear, and will
display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2,
3, etc.
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-
ward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into
the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE,
and NEUTRAL.
Shift Lever
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-
wanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to AutoStick
in this section for further information) to select a lower
gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller will expand the range of
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to pre-
vent transmission damage due to overheating.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine coolant temperature.
Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera-
ture has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
ate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illu-
minated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
and many other situations.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position (beside
the Drive position), it can be moved forward and rear-
ward. This allows the driver to manually select the
transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever
forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever
rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out (from a stop) in first, second, or third
gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful
in snow or icy conditions. To select second or third
gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the shift
lever rearward (+) once or twice.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The system will ignore shift commands that would
cause engine lugging or overspeed. An audible beep
will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged
because the transmission will not shift automatically.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the
DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
•
Driving through standing water may cause damage to
your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect
your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission,
axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle
if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced or no power steer-
ing assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon as pos-
sible.
If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING” message is displayed on the EVIC
screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers
may have occurred which caused an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once driving
conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for
a few moments until the icon and message turn off. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the Steering icon, and the ⬙SERVICE POWER STEER-
ING - ASSIST OFF⬙ message is displayed on the EVIC
screen, the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized
dealer for service. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
Parking Brake
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake should
always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmis-
sion in REVERSE or first (1st) gear. Failure to do so
may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
SPORT MODE
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver
with slight increases in effort and throttle pedal-to-engine
response. This driving mode is useful while driving on
twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in
spirited cornering.
1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button.
Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
2. Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.
3. Press the accelerator pedal again to activate.
SPORT Button
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver
with slight increase in effort and changes the transmis-
sion shift schedules for more aggressive shifting. This
driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads
where more steering precision is desired in spirited
cornering.
1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button.
Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
2. Press the SPORT button again to return to the standard
driving mode.
SPORT Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Con-
trol System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to
enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the
fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure
is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD),
functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls
the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven
axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply
the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not
spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC
are in the Partial Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for further information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short period of time, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 2.5% (manual transmission) or 7%
grade or greater (automatic transmission) hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill
is in REVERSE gear).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system enhances
directional control and stability of the vehicle under
various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering
or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of
the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteering or understeering condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to deter-
mine the vehicle path intended by the driver and com-
pares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
NOTE: The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering
column (Manual Transmission Only).
ESC Off Switch (Automatic Transmission)
ESC Off Switch (Manual Transmission)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations.
ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific
reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the ESC
Off switch. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle
is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more
wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to
gain traction.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
To turn ESC on again, momentarily pushing the switch
again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of
operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off
mode by pushing the switch. Once the situation requiring
ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome,
turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the switch.
This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
tem is reduced.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If
the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located in
the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose
traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS
is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure –
Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-
sure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can
cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase
your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended
load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
(Continued)
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This
tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or
rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs
to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Front Tires.
• Due to limited clearance, a 185/55R15 tire with a
Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile
traction device or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 30 psi
(207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F (20° C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a tempera-
ture drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In
this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your an authorized dealership to
have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be
activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire
xxx.x psi” text message will display when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this
occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. The system will automatically update
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and
the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” text mes-
sage will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this
sequence will repeat providing the system fault still
exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur with any of the following sce-
narios:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
• Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly.
• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire.
• However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
• This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
Enhanced System — If Equipped
When the vehicle is equipped with an enhanced TPM
system, the driver can view text messages showing the
actual tire pressure value by position by selecting the tire
pressure menu command in the instrument cluster. Refer
to the instrument panel features section of the owners
manual.
Premium TPM System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic show-
ing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure tire highlighted in a different color.
Low Tire Indicator
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
sound a chime and also display a “Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System” message in the EVIC for approxi-
mately 5 seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the “Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System” message will no longer display, and
a pressure value will display in place of the dashes.
Service TPM System Message
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect
sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the ⬙Service
Tire Pressure Monitoring System⬙ message is then fol-
lowed with a graphic display with pressure values still
shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still
being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be
located in the correct vehicle position. The system still
needs to be serviced as long as the ⬙Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System⬙ message is displayed.
NOTE:
• The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replace-
ment tire installed without a tire pressure sensor.
• If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on and
a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
EVIC will still display a pressure value highlighted in
a different color.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
display a “Service TPM System” message and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a “Service Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System” message and dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it, the TPMS will update automatically. In addi-
tion, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States MRXC4W4MA4
Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4
(Single)
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide optimum
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high quality unleaded “Regular” gaso-
line having a posted octane number of 87
as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher
octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — 1.4L Turbo
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations, provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “Regular” gasoline
having a posted octane number of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. For optimum perfor-
mance and fuel economy the use of “Premium” 91 octane
gasoline or higher is recommended.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% Ethanol, Methyl Tert-Butyl Ether
(MTBE), and Ethyl Tret-Butyl Ether (ETBE). Oxygenates
are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E-85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control sys-
tem.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation sys-
tem to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermar-
ket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. It may
cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL off.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE Transmission in NEUTRAL NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with
the front wheels OFF the ground).
Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be
flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) at any
legal highway speed, for any distance, if the manual
transmission is in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........303
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............303
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........304
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage .................305
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .305
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions..........306
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........309
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................315
▫ Torque Specifications ...................315
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED .........................316
▫ Jack Location ........................317
▫ Spare Tire Removal ....................318
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................320
▫ Jacking Instructions ...................321
▫ Road Tire Installation ...................328
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ....................330
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE ............330
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............331
6
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................333
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............334
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE ................336
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........337
▫ Automatic Transmission .................338
▫ Manual Transmission ...................339
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM .............................339
302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with
the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark,
the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When
safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at
idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a
minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located under the front driver’s
seat.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the
bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼”
(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye,
and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or
skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1.
Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
66 Ft-Lbs (90 N·m)
Steel Wheels Only
75 Ft-Lbs (100 N·m)
Aluminum Wheels
Only
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
(Continued)
Torque Patterns
316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack wrench tool are stowed in a bag under
the front driver’s seat.
Jack And Jack-Handle Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed to the underbody below the
cargo area.
1. Remove the plug located in the rear cargo area.
2. Fit the wrench tool over the drive nut. Use the wrench
to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on
the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you
to pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
Winch Access Plug
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench tool only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and they can dam-
age the winch.
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle.
Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the center of the wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
Retainer
320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission)
or REVERSE (manual transmission).
5. Turn Off the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
NOTE: Refer to the “Compact Spare Tire” section of the
“Tires-General Information” under “Starting And Oper-
ating” for information about the spare tire, it’s use, and
operation.
Jack Warning Label
322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the
driver’s seat.
2. Remove center cap.
NOTE: Before using the swivel wrench to remove the
wheel bolts be sure to remove the center cap of the wheel
by inserting the angled tab end of the swivel wrench into
the notched part of the center cap.
Center Cap Removal
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323
3. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel bolts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each
side of the body (as indicated by the triangular lift point
symbol on the sill molding).
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the
jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest
to the wheel to be changed.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
Jack Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325
5. Using the swivel wrench, raise the vehicle by turning
the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the
hub. For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels,
the center caps must be removed to remove the wheel
bolts. For vehicles equipped with steel wheels the
wheel covers must be removed to remove the wheel
bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
7. Install the spare wheel and wheel bolts with the cone
shaped end of the bolts toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the bolts. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each bolt has been tightened twice. For the correct
wheel bolt torque refer to Torque Specifications in this
section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your autho-
rized dealership or service station.
10. Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the
bag. Stow it under the driver’s seat and secure the
bag to the floor with the straps attached to the floor
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Have
the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
12. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure as required.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand. Do
not use a hammer or excessive force to install the
cover.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel Bolt
328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3.
Install the four wheel bolts with the cone shaped end of
the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
4. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
5. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this sec-
tion for correct wheel bolt torque.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this sec-
tion for correct wheel bolt torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Spare Tire Stowage
Reverse instructions of the spare removal section.
Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut
clockwise until effort becomes heavy and an audible click
is heard indicating the spare is properly stowed.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield.
Battery Posts
1 — Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
2 — Negative (-) Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the positive (+)
battery post. To remove the cover, push the locking tab
and pull upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear
and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently
334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
pushing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelera-
tor pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels, or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lever override access cover (located
on the right side of the shift lever housing) by prying
at the bottom edge of the cover.
4. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
Shift Lever Override Access Hole
336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the
access hole, and push and hold the override release
lever in.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The
Ground
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 65 mph (104 km/h) max speed
Wheel Lift Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
•
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Automatic Transmission
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the battery is
discharged, refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
in order to move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a
conventional automatic transmission. Damage to
the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require
towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
(Continued)
338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Manual Transmission
• Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not cov-
ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
After the event occurs, when the system is active, the
message ⬙Fuel Cutoff See Handbook⬙ is displayed.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine com-
partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
System Reset Procedure
After an impact causing airbag deployment, the left and
right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel
cluster, will both be blinking, until the ignition is turned
off.
In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you
must follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action Customer Will See
1. Turn ignition OFF.
(Turn Signal Switch Must
be placed in Neutral
State).
2. Turn ignition ON. Left Turn Light is OFF.
Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
3. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Right Turn Light is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
4. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Left Turn Light is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Light
BLINKS.
340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Customer Action Customer Will See
5. Turn Right Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Right Turn Light is ON
SOLID. Left Turn Light
BLINKS.
6. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch ON.
Left Turn Light is ON
SOLID. Right Turn Light
is ON SOLID.
7. Turn Left Turn Signal
Switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Left Turn Light is OFF.
Right Turn Light is OFF.
8. Turn ignition OFF. System is now reset and
the engine may be
started.
9. Turn Hazard Flashers
OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45
seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the
reset procedure must be performed again in order to be
successful.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L ..........345
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .346
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .347
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .............347
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................349
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................349
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........350
▫ Engine Oil ..........................351
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................354
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................355
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............355
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............356
▫ Body Lubrication .....................360
▫ Wiper Blades ........................361
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................363
▫ Exhaust System ......................364
▫ Cooling System ......................366
▫ Brake System ........................372
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......375
7
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....375
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................377
▫ Convertible Top Care — If Equipped .......385
䡵 FUSES ..............................387
▫ Interior Fuses ........................388
▫ Underhood Fuses......................390
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................393
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................394
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................396
▫ Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam ......396
▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime
Running Lamps.......................396
▫ Front Fog Lamps ......................397
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps............397
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal
Lamps .............................398
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .398
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................399
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................400
▫ Engine .............................400
▫ Chassis ............................402
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses)
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance
and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de-
signed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine
parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by
the manufacturer’s warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes
after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil
level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and
approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine
is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Maintain the oil level between the range mark-
ings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a
crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when
the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will
result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can
lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil
temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased
oil temperature could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time or one year, whichever comes first.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Turbo Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-12991.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Engine (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-30 engine oil recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE
Grade)
MOPAR® SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recom-
mended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmen-
tal Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser-
vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the
lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the Torx® screw that secures the passenger
side console closeout cover.
Torx® Screw Location
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
3. Remove the two 5.5 mm screws (1 and 2) that secure
the particulate air filter cover to the HVAC housing.
Console Closeout Panel Air Filter Cover Screw Locations
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
4. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing. Take note of the air filter position indica-
tors.
5. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
6. Install the passenger side console closeout.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
A/C Air Filter
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up-
ward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
1—WiperArm
2 — Pivot Cap
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be
checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with wind-
shield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze).
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section for fur-
ther information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
1—WiperBlade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3—WiperArm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
CAUTION! (Continued)
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F
(−37° C) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the bottom and top lines marked “COLD FILL
RANGE”.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also
reduce braking capacity in an emergency.
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
both the brake system and the clutch release system. The
two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in
one system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle
is also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis-
sion.
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
mission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have
your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
(Continued)
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Convertible Top Care — If Equipped
NOTE: Lubricate the top rails with Berulub FR 43 every
2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can dam-
age the top material. Also, increased water pressure
may force past the weather strips.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry
the surface before opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while the top
is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles
interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicles interior.
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
top and storage compartment.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
Washing
Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car
washing equipment can damage the top material. If you
must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are
preferred.
CAUTION!
Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may
force water past the weather strips.
General Cleaning
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful
in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in
partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle
before washing the top. The top should be washed with
a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap
solution such as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use
detergent.
CAUTION!
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.
Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic sol-
vents, petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always
wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering
it into the storage area.
Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two
square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the
entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from
the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and
chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering.
Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will
decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt,
and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains
persist, contact your local authorized dealer for further
suggestions.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under
the instrument panel.
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse
Number
Mini Fuse Description
1 F12 7.5 Amp Brown Right Low Beam
2 F32 5 Amp Tan Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and
Door Courtesy Lights
Fuse Panel
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse
Number
Mini Fuse Description
3 F53 5 Amp Tan Instrument Panel Node
4 F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Locking
5 F36 10 Amp Red
Diagnostic Socket, Car Radio, Climate Control System
6 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer
7 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
8 F13 7.5 Amp Brown Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling
9 F50 7.5 Amp Brown Airbag
10 F51 5 Amp Tan Car Radio Switch, Climate Control System,
Stop Light, Clutch
11 F37 5 Amp Tan Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node
12 F49 5 Amp Tan Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror, Parking Sensor
13 F31 5 Amp Tan Ignition, Climate Control
14 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of
the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the
fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover.
The ID number of the electrical component correspond-
ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller
F02 20 Amp Yellow – Audio Amplifier
Front Distribution Unit
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – Anti-Lock Brake Pump
F05 70 Amp Tan – Electric Power Steering
F06 20 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan - Single Speed
F06 30 Amp Green – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 40 Amp Orange – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F09 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F10 – 10 Amp Red Horn
F11 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain
F11 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F14 – 5 Amp Tan High Beam (Shutter)
F15 – 15 Amp Blue Cigar Lighter
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission
F17 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F17 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F18 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain
F18 – 5 Amp Tan Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Seats – If Equipped
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Anti-Lock Brake Valves
F24 – 7.5 Amp Brown Stability Control System
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps
F82 30 Amp Green – Sunroof/Convertible Top
F83 20 Amp Yellow – Cooling Pump – If Equipped
F84 – 10 Amp Red Transmission
F85 30 Amp Green – Rear Defroster
F87 – 5 Amp Tan Rear Defroster
F90 – 5 Amp Tan Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Proce-
dures” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Courtesy Lamp W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21/5W
Front Fog Lamps H11LL
Front Side Marker Lamps W3W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Side Direction Lamps WY5W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Bulb Number
Rear Tail and Stop Lamps P21/5W
Rear Backup Lamps W16W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp W5W
License Plate Lamps LED (See Authorized dealer)
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp
housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running
Lamps
1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right.
2. Open the wheel housing access door.
Wheel Housing Access Door
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp
housing.
4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
7. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand
access to side marker lamp.
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replace-
ment bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the wheel liner.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp
assembly.
3. Remove four screws and separate the backplate from
the lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
1.
Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening screws.
2. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly.
3. Disconnect the electric connector.
4. Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder.
5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb to be replaced and re-
place it.
6. Close the back cap locking it properly.
7. Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the
guard caps.
Tail Lamp Assembly Screws
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 10.5 Gallons 40 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
Cooling System
1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR®
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) —
with Manual Transmission
4.6 Quarts 4.4 Liters
1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR®
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) —
with Automatic Transmission
5.8 Quarts 5.5 Liters
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant – 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 1.4L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-30
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA US Mate-
rial Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil,
meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard
MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter – 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Spark Plugs – 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 1.4L/1.4L Turbo Engine 87 Octane Acceptable — 91 Octane Recommended.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR® C635 DDCT/MTX
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only MOPAR® AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid
or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect
the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703
should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Convertible Top Rails – If Equipped We recommend you use Berulub FR 43.
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator sys-
tem turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
Inspect brake pads, rotors, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Check and adjust hand brake.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road
conditions.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405
Maintenance Chart
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals, and replace if
necessary.
XXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings. Replace as
necessary.
XXXXXXX
406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect parking brake function. Adjust
as necessary.
XXXXXXX
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. XXXXXXX
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Replace spark plugs (1.4L Engine). ** X
Replace spark plugs
(1.4L Turbo Engine). **
XXXXX
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if nec-
essary.
X
Replace the timing belt. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ...................412
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............412
▫ Prepare A List ........................412
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............412
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............412
▫ FIAT Customer Center ..................413
▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center ............413
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .............414
▫ Service Contract ......................414
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............415
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............415
▫
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .415
▫ In Canada...........................416
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............416
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ........417
▫ Treadwear...........................418
▫ Traction Grades .......................418
▫ Temperature Grades....................418
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FIAT Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone:
1-888-242-6342
FIAT Canada Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800-
465-2001 (English) Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA USA LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA USA LLC vehicles. In-
cluded are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
• Call toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
• Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 417
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
418 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 419
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............368
Adding Fuel .............................297
Adding Washer Fluid ......................363
Additives, Fuel ...........................295
AirBag.................................39
Air Bag Operation .......................42
Air Bag Warning Light ....................52
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................43
Enhanced Accident Response ................50
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................54
FrontAirBag...........................39
If A Deployment Occurs ...................48
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................43
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............53
Air Bag Deployment ........................39
Air Bag Light .......................52, 77, 145
Air Bag Maintenance .......................53
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .355
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................356
Air Conditioning..........................208
Air Conditioning Controls ...................208
Air Conditioning Filter .....................358
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............216
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..........356, 357, 358
Air Conditioning System .............208, 210, 356
Air Pressure, Tires.........................269
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............367, 399
Capacities ............................399
Disposal ..............................370
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................248
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................145
Appearance Care .........................377
Automatic Dimming Mirror...................89
Automatic Oil Change Indicator ...............404
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........210
Automatic Transaxle ........................11
Automatic Transmission ..............229, 375, 377
422 INDEX
Adding Fluid .......................376, 377
Fluid And Filter Changes ..................377
Fluid Change ..........................377
Fluid Level Check .......................376
Fluid Type ............................402
Gear Ranges ...........................233
Special Additives .......................376
Autostick ...............................238
Battery.................................355
Jump Starting ..........................330
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........18
Belts, Seat ...............................77
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................360
B-Pillar Location ..........................263
Brake Assist System .......................250
Brake Fluid ..........................400, 402
Brake, Parking ...........................244
Brakes .................................372
Brake System .........................248, 372
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................248
Master Cylinder ........................373
Parking ..............................244
Warning Light .........................145
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................231
Bulb Replacement......................394, 396
Bulbs, Light...........................79, 394
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........399
Capacities, Fluid ..........................399
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................297
Oil (Engine) ........................353, 404
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................76, 297
Cargo Area Features .......................135
Car Washes .............................378
CD (Compact Disc) Player ...................179
Cellular Phone ...........................207
10
INDEX 423
Chains, Tire .............................280
Change Oil Indicator .......................404
Changing A Flat Tire .......................316
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................258
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ............145, 347
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............75
Checks, Safety ............................75
Child Restraint ............................55
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................60
Child Restraints .........................55
Child Seat Installation .....................71
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt ........68
Infants And Child Restraints ................58
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint ....66
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt ..............................69
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......62
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........58
Seating Positions ........................61
Clean Air Gasoline ........................294
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................379
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................361
Climate Control ..........................208
Clutch .................................373
Clutch Fluid .............................373
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............206
Compact Spare Tire........................275
Connector
UCI.................................204
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........204
Contract, Service ..........................414
Convertible Top Maintenance .................385
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................399, 400
Cooling System...........................366
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............368
424 INDEX
Coolant Capacity .......................400
Coolant Level ......................367, 371
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................370
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................367
Inspection ............................371
Points To Remember ..................370, 371
Pressure Cap ..........................370
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ............367
Corrosion Protection .......................377
Cruise Light .............................145
Cupholders .............................134
Customer Assistance .......................412
Data Recorder, Event .......................54
Daytime Running Lights ....................110
Dealer Service............................349
Defroster, Windshield ....................77, 210
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................347
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ..................376
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................370
Door Locks ..............................21
Door Locks, Automatic ......................23
Downshifting ............................229
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ................................240
Electrical Power Outlets.....................131
Electric Remote Mirrors......................90
Electronic Brake Control System ...............248
Brake Assist System .....................250
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........118
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............252
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)......158
Exit Trip ..............................164
NewTrip.............................164
Start Of Trip Procedure ...................164
10
INDEX 425
Trip Computer .........................163
Trip Functions .........................165
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................303
Jacking ...............................316
Jump Starting ..........................330
Towing ..............................337
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........347
Engine
Air Cleaner ...........................355
Break-In Recommendations .................74
Checking Oil Level ......................351
Compartment .......................345, 346
Cooling ..............................366
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................76, 297
Fails To Start ..........................225
Flooded, Starting .......................225
Fuel Requirements ...................293, 400
Oil ..............................351, 399
Oil Filler Cap ..........................353
Oil Selection .......................352, 400
Oil Synthetic ..........................354
Overheating ...........................303
Starting ..............................223
Enhanced Accident Response Feature.........50, 339
Euro Twin Clutch Transmission
Fluid Type ............................375
Event Data Recorder ........................54
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................76, 297
Exhaust System ........................76, 364
Exterior Lights.........................79, 394
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................355
Air Conditioning .......................358
Engine Fuel ...........................400
Engine Oil ............................354
Engine Oil Disposal .....................354
426 INDEX
Flashers
Turn Signal .........................79, 145
Flooded Engine Starting ....................225
Fluid, Brake .............................402
Fluid Capacities ..........................399
Fluid Leaks ..............................79
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ..................376
Fluids .................................400
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........400
Fog Lights ...........................113,145
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................334
Fuel...................................293
Adding ..............................297
Additives .............................295
Capacity .............................399
Clean Air .............................294
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................297
Gasoline ..............................293
Light ................................145
Materials Added ........................295
Octane Rating ..........................293
Requirements ..........................293
Specifications ..........................400
Tank Capacity ..........................399
Fueling ................................297
Fuses ..................................387
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ................297, 299
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................294
Gasoline (Fuel)........................293, 399
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................294
Gauges
Odometer .............................145
Gear Ranges .............................233
Gear Select Lever Override ..................336
General Information .......................292
General Maintenance.......................350
10
INDEX 427
Glass Cleaning ...........................383
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .........................240
Headlights ..............................109
Cleaning .............................383
Passing ..............................110
Switch ...............................110
Heated Mirrors............................91
Heated Seats.............................103
Heater .................................208
Hill Start Assist...........................251
Holder, Cup .............................134
Hood Release ............................107
Ignition .................................11
Key..................................11
Ignition Key Removal .......................11
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................13
Information Center, Vehicle ..................158
Instrument Cluster .....................142, 145
Instrument Panel And Controls ...............141
Instrument Panel Cover .....................383
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............384
Interior Appearance Care....................382
Interior Lighting ..........................112
Introduction ..............................4
Jacking Instructions........................321
Jack Location ............................317
Jack Operation ........................316, 321
Jump Starting ............................330
Key-In Reminder ..........................13
Key, Replacement ..........................14
Keys ...................................11
428 INDEX
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................13
Lane Change Assist ........................111
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................29
Latches .................................79
Hood ................................107
Lead Free Gasoline ........................293
Leaks, Fluid ..............................79
Life Of Tires .............................278
Liftgate (Sedan) ...........................25
Light Bulbs ...........................79, 394
Lights ...............................79, 109
AirBag .........................52, 77, 145
Anti-Lock .............................145
Brake Assist Warning ....................255
Brake Warning .........................145
Bulb Replacement .......................396
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) .........145
Engine Temperature Warning ...............145
Exterior ...............................79
Fog .................................145
High Beam ........................110,145
High Beam Indicator .....................145
Low Fuel .............................145
Oil Pressure ...........................145
Park .................................110
Passing ..............................110
Seat Belt Reminder ......................145
Service ...............................396
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............145
Traction Control ........................255
Turn Signal .........................79, 111
Voltage ..............................145
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......145
Loading Vehicle
Tires ................................263
Locks
Automatic Door .........................23
10
INDEX 429
Door .................................21
Power Door ............................22
Lubrication, Body .........................360
Lug Nuts ...............................315
Maintenance Free Battery....................355
Maintenance, General ......................350
Maintenance Procedures ....................350
Maintenance Schedule ......................404
Maintenance Schedules .....................404
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).......347
Manual, Service ..........................416
Manual Transmission ...................226, 375
Fluid Level Check .......................375
Frequency Of Fluid Change ................375
Lubricant Selection ...................375, 402
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................373
Media Hub ..............................97
Mirrors .................................88
Automatic Dimming ......................89
Electric Powered .........................90
Heated ...............................91
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................283
Multi-Function Control Lever .................109
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................74
Occupant Restraints ........................26
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................293
Odometer...............................145
Trip.................................145
Oil Change Indicator .......................163
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................163
Oil, Engine .......................351, 399, 400
Capacity ..........................399, 400
Change Interval ........................351
Checking .............................351
Disposal ..............................354
430 INDEX
Filter ................................354
Filter Disposal .........................354
Identification Logo ......................352
Materials Added To ......................354
Recommendation ....................352, 399
Synthetic .............................354
Viscosity .............................353
Oil Filter, Selection ........................354
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................347
Operating Precautions ......................347
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............5
Overheating, Engine .......................303
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........5,416
Paint Care ..............................377
Parking Brake............................244
Passing Light ............................110
Pets....................................74
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........264
Power
Door Locks ............................22
Mirrors ...............................90
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........131
Steering ..............................242
Sunroof ..............................128
Windows ..............................24
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............35
Preparation For Jacking .....................320
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................35
Radial Ply Tires ..........................271
Radio Operation.......................179, 207
Radio Reception ..........................179
Radio (Sound Systems) .....................179
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) .......................25
Rear Window Features .....................137
Recorder, Event Data .......................54
10
INDEX 431
Recreational Towing .......................299
Reformulated Gasoline .....................294
Refrigerant...........................357, 358
Release, Hood............................107
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
FCC General Information ..................20
Power Convertible Top Function .............16
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........205
Replacement Bulbs ........................394
Replacement Keys .........................14
Replacement Parts.........................349
Replacement Tires .........................278
Reporting Safety Defects ....................415
Restraints, Child...........................55
Restraints, Occupant ........................26
Rotation, Tires ...........................282
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................77
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................79
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................415
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................76
Safety Information, Tire .....................256
Safety Tips ...............................75
Schedule, Maintenance .....................404
Seat Belt
Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode .......38
Energy Management Feature ................36
Engage The Automatic Locking Mode .........38
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................29
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............34
Pregnant Women ........................35
Seat Belt Extender .......................34
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................35
Seat Belt System .........................26
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................384
Seat Belts .............................28, 77
Child Restraint ..........................55
Extender ..............................34
432 INDEX
Front Seat ........................28, 29, 32
Inspection .............................77
Operating Instructions ....................32
Pregnant Women ........................35
Pretensioners ...........................35
Rear Seat ..............................29
Reminder .............................145
Untwisting Procedure .....................34
Seats ...................................99
Adjustment ............................99
Heated ...............................103
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information ..................14
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................13
Service Assistance .........................412
Service Contract ..........................414
Service Manuals ..........................416
Shift Lever Override .......................336
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission .............228
Shoulder Belts ............................29
Signals, Turn .......................79, 111, 145
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................280
Snow Tires ..............................273
Spare Tire ...........................275, 276
Spark Plugs .............................400
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............118,145
Sport Mode .............................246
Starting ................................223
Automatic Transmission ..................223
Cold Weather ..........................224
Engine Fails To Start .....................225
Manual Transmission ....................223
Steering
Power ...............................242
Tilt Column ...........................117
Wheel, Tilt ............................117
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............205
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .205
10
INDEX 433
Storage ................................393
Storage, Vehicle...........................217
Stuck, Freeing............................334
Sun Roof ...............................128
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........39
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................354
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........210
Tilt Steering Column .......................117
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......263, 264
Tire Markings ............................256
Tires.............................79, 268, 417
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................278
Air Pressure ...........................268
Chains ...............................280
Changing .............................316
Compact Spare .........................275
General Information .....................268
High Speed ...........................271
Inflation Pressures .......................269
Jacking ...............................316
Life Of Tires ...........................278
Load Capacity ......................263, 264
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............283
Pressure Warning Light ...................145
Quality Grading ........................417
Radial ...............................271
Replacement ...........................278
Rotation ..............................282
Safety ............................256, 268
Sizes ................................258
Snow Tires ............................273
Spinning .............................276
Tread Wear Indicators ....................277
Tire Safety Information .....................256
Tire Service Kit ...........................304
T
o Open Hood ...........................107
Towing ................................299
434 INDEX
Disabled Vehicle ........................337
Recreational ...........................299
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........299
Traction .............................239, 240
Traction Control ..........................251
Trailer Towing ...........................299
Transaxle
Automatic .............................11
Transmission ............................375
Automatic .........................229, 375
Fluid ................................375
Manual ..............................226
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .18
Transporting Pets ..........................74
Tread Wear Indicators ......................277
Trip Odometer ...........................145
Turn Signals ..........................111,145
UCI Connector ...........................204
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................417
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .204
Unleaded Gasoline ........................293
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................34
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............7
Vehicle Loading ..........................264
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............8
Vehicle Storage........................217, 393
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .145
Warnings And Cautions ......................7
Warranty Information ....................4,415
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................363
Washers, Windshield ....................114,116
Washing Vehicle ..........................378
Water
Driving Through ........................240
10
INDEX 435
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................379
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................379
Wind Buffeting ........................25, 129
Window Fogging .........................216
Windows ................................24
Power ................................24
Windshield Defroster ....................77, 210
Windshield Washers ....................114,116
Windshield Wiper Blades....................361
Windshield Wipers ........................114
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................361
436 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 FIAT 500
15FF500-126-AE Fifth Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FIAT 500
FCA US LLC
